Keyboard Part Number List
3428 keyboards found/on record (showing page 7/14 - results 1501 to 1750)...
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H0468 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language The original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H0469 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H0470 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H1331 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131273 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish F-New (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131276 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131277 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131278 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131279 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131280 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131281 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131282 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131283 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131284 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131285 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish Q-Old (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131287 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131288 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131289 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131290 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131291 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131292 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bosnian and Slovenian/Croatian/Serbian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131293 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131294 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131295 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131296 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovak (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131297 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungarian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131298 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romanian (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8131299 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133896 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1998-2TM-102 Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133897 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133898 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133899 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133901 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133902 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133904 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133905 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133906 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133907 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8133909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI EMEA (ASCII-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397800 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397750 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397861 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397754 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397862 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397927 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.ifixit.com/Guide/IBM+PS2+CL57+SX+Disassembly/145427 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397925 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397926 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397928 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397929 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1398299 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type I Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
89 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
This keyboard assembly is also presumbly for the IBM PS/55 Note N27sx (Japanese exclusive version of the IBM PS/2 CL57SX) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399300 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
16mm trackball |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was used as the keyboard assembly on Lexmark AR-10 derived laptops |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-60K-84-A Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=32f51f16ab7af099 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
30F9388 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Brother Industries |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
106 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese Kanji |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396046 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1396051 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available as an option for IBM PS/2 systems |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/2 Model 25 SX Hardware Maintenance Manual pamphlet (#S10G-6610-00) [source: ManualsLib] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396047 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1396052 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish/Latin ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available as an option for IBM PS/2 systems |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/2 Model 25 SX Hardware Maintenance Manual pamphlet (#S10G-6610-00) [source: ManualsLib] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3565 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2767 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English (EMEA) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3566 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6889 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3567 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2768 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3568 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6891 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3569 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6892 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3570 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2769 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3571 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6894 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3572 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6896 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3573 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6897 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3574 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6898 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3575 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
2772 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German/French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Industrial Computer Feature Enhancements and Additions Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0306) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3601 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3602 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3604 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G4426 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
33G6029 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1992-60K-86 Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=00855f9b4800c112 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G4492 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canadian/Australian ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G6025 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G6026 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G6027 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G6028 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G6031 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9573 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9578 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9583 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9593 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss (French) ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9598 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9603 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9608 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
33G9613 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2141 PS/note 182 (IBM PS/1 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
86 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss (German) ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/note model 182 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0266) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/epr2b/f4838.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44G3618 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
44G3794 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-60K-84 Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44G3620 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
44G3796 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
89 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese JIS |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1992-60K-89 Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44G3795 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9230 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9231 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish Speaking |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9235 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French AZERTY |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9236 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (Gray) |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9237 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9238 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9239 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9240 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9241 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9243 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9244 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9245 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9246 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9247 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9248 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9249 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9250 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9251 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
48G9252 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q3 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122796 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium/Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122797 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium/France |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122798 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122799 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finland |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122800 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
France |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122801 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Austria/Germany |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/vintagecomputing/comments/bjgno9/black_ibm_ps1_2133911_with_black_model_m2_keyboard/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122802 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italy |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm Web: https://www.1000bit.it/scheda.asp?id=2250 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122803 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Netherlands |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122804 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122805 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122806 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122807 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8122808 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 2133 Personal System/1 Model 911 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Anthracite Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK/Ireland |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/1 - Machine Type 2133 Announcement Letter (#ZG92-0301) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm/f102.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
59G7982 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5236 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sold under the OPTIONS by IBM brand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Announcement Summary - February 9, 1993 (#C93-002) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/ibm-lexmark-keyboard-mouse-combo-3773003189 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399601 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1399644 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Presently suspected to be an IBM 3152 ASCII Display Station keyboard |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20240915202522/https://www.ebay.pl/itm/274005451922 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4740 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Macedonian/Serbian Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4741 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bulgarian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4743 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?p=405096#p405096 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4744 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovakian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4746 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1398538 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220414160100/https://allegro.pl/oferta/ibm-model-m-klawiatura-mechaniczna-12052576445 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4747 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romanian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4749 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish (F) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
01M1525 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Equivalent to P/N 71G4644 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369167 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
CompuAdd rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220515135346/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/125205138234?orig_cvip=true |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369294 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French Canadian |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1370477 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
60G0814 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1397662 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-1370477-made-by-lexmark-06-07-93/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1378162 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1378163 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra isosceles trapezium |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20221220170754/https://www.ebay.com/itm/404057758327/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397771 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
CompuAdd rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
AT-style US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/wiki/CompuAdd_Model_M |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399570 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1399572 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=9fe4101144398747 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399936 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386718 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
The two examples of this keyboard found by Brandon @ ClickyKeyboards were missing branding but had a rectangular cutout for a Lexmark-style logo and one came with Lexmark manuals and brochures |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230603231415/https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-1399936-06-11-93-102-key-uk-new-with-original-keyboard-manuals-and-brochures/ Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-1399936-06-11-93-102-key-uk-new-2/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
52G9658 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
92F0332 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386085 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6381 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6382 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6384 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6387 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6472 ValuePoint IBM 6482 ValuePoint IBM 6484 ValuePoint IBM 6492 ValuePoint IBM 6494 ValuePoint IBM 7043 RS/6000 43P Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-EEP-101 Doc: IBM PS/ValuePoint Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S61G-1423-01) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM ValuePoint Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S83G-7790-00) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM RS/6000 7043 43P Series Service Guide (#SA38-0512-03) [source: IBM] Web: https://ide-research.net/keyboard/keyboard-review/ibm-enhanced-101/52g9658/ Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-52g9658-made-by-ibm-05-08-93/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
52G9700 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
92F0332 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386085 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6381 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6382 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6384 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6387 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6472 ValuePoint IBM 6482 ValuePoint IBM 6484 ValuePoint IBM 6492 ValuePoint IBM 6494 ValuePoint |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/ValuePoint Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S61G-1423-01) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM ValuePoint Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S83G-7790-00) [source: kev009] Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-52g9700-made-for-ibm-by-lexmark-23-sep-93/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G3571 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
KB571 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$99.99 in 1994 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm Web: https://archive.org/details/microtimesissue100unse_1/page/190/mode/2up |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
70G8638 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
GTSI DeskTop rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMB1001 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://picclick.co.uk/Ambra-keyboard-subsidiary-of-IBM-Model-M-PS2-282767587448.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMB1003 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378003 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey straightened-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Secondary IBM part number is 1370602 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230501204122/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/304843182547?orig_cvip=true&nordt=true&rt=nc |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMB1006 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=7805 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMB1007 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378015 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey straightened-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Secondary IBM part number is 1378015 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=11840 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=24b3f82187eeeb3d |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMB1018 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Secondary IBM part number is 1378001 |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
Miguel Farah |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMB2001 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378086 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Secondary IBM part number is 1378086 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-EAM-102 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
SMB1019 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/modelm/comments/1d2vbeo/anyone_have_info_on_this_one_its_an_icpi_ambra/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394124 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394150 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K., Unicomp |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge, Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394167 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394177 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9122 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K., Unicomp |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
2002-03-26 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge, Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
English (United States/Canada) MNCS ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Withdrawal: IBM 3488 InfoWindow Terminal (5250-Twinax Terminal for AS/400) (#902-036) [source: IBM] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20221231150808/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/266021697075 Web: https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/de/ssw_ibm_i_71/nls/rbagssbcskybrddispprtnumb.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394625 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1394806 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3472 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has APL keycap sublegends, Unicomp sold a USB-converted version as part of their Black Friday 2019 sales |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.pckeyboard.com/page/product/1394625 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397953 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
For use with IBM 3476, 3477, 3486, 3487, 3488 and 3489 terminals |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4751 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
35G4750 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Withdrawn from marketing in 1997-04-22 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/a312.htm Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/de/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G3570 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
KB570 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M1 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$69.99 in 1994 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm Web: https://archive.org/details/microtimesissue100unse_1/page/190/mode/2up |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369249 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=2fd26179840c51a7 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395717 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish (179) ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399362 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20240705194352/https://allegrolokalnie.pl/oferta/stara-klawiatura-ibm-model-m2 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399363 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=c72de62cd1eeb4f6 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMK1001 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with italic legends aligned in the bottom-left corner of the keycaps, secondary IBM part number is 1399750 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-2AM-102 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
AMK1003 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Ambra "Blue-Grey" |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with italic legends aligned in the bottom-left corner of the keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://picclick.fr/alte-Tastatur-Original-IBM-ICPI-AMBRA-AMK1003-Keyboard-382796769657.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0817 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard with Expanded Border |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
EduQuest logo, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Made for use with IBM EduQuest computers (PS/2s for the educational market) |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397901 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4 Space Saver Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=e8342997b3abf7b9 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1379044 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
8259635 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
19 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has "End" and "00" keys |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1379590 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G2901 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
61G2900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1379593 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G2837 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm Web: https://imgur.com/gallery/wvVfWI5 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1379595 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G2845 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2841 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2849 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2853 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2857 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2861 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2865 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2869 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2873 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2877 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2881 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2885 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2889 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2893 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2897 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2905 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3257 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bulgarian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3259 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungarian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3261 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3263 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3265 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romanian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3267 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian/Cyrillic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3269 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Serbian/Cyrillic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3271 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovakian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3273 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3277 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Yugoslavian (former) |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/eprmhtml/eprm1/h2600.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1379550 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G2903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
19 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has "Tab" and "00" keys |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1370478 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
60G0816 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-1 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
16mm trackball |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20221215225813/https://www.ebay.com/itm/334649742355?orig_cvip=true |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1398150 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1398148 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-52P-101 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399912 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G3572 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1398148 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
KB572 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/ibm-model-keyboard-m5-60g3572-3863664172 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
59G7980 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5229 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available as an option for IBM PS/2 systems |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Announcement Summary - February 9, 1993 (#C93-002) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
59G7981 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5235 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available as an option for IBM PS/2 systems |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Announcement Summary - February 9, 1993 (#C93-002) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395901 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canada (French) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 andd 2168Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395906 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395907 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395908 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium (French) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 andd 2168Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Netherlands |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395910 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium (Dutch) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 andd 2168Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395912 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395913 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395914 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395915 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395916 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395917 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish (179) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395919 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Israel |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395920 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395921 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-French ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395922 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-German ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396497 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 andd 2168Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397036 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
LA Spanish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399045 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 andd 2168Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399078 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greece |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399081 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Yugoslavia (Latin) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399358 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bulgaria (Cyrillic) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399374 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Serbia (Cyrillic) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399375 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russia (Cyrillic) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399376 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399377 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech Republic |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399378 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovakia |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399379 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungary |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399380 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romania |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
93F0114 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM PS/1 models 2133, 2155 and 2168 and IBM Aptiva model 2144 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware Maintenance Service for IBM PS/1 Types 2133, 2155, and 2168 (#63G2028) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM Aptiva - 2144 EMEA FRU-P/N Cross Ref List (#DETR-3VPK8M) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
59G9757 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
13H6724 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5237 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to DIN (180) & DE-9 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sold under OPTIONS by IBM brand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Announcement Summary - February 9, 1993 (#C93-002) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
59G7569 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
60G1753 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada/Australia |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0223 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0230 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finland |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0237 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0251 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0258 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Denmark |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0265 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium/Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0272 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Netherlands |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0279 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1653 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US/Canada/Australia |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1716 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1793 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1794 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1795 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1796 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1797 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1798 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1799 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1800 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G1801 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6 Type II Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
59G7920 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type IV Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1995-01-13 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
81 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad 500 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-167) [source: IBM] Doc: Withdrawal: IBM ThinkPad 500 Systems and Selected Mobile Features (#194-427) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] |